Keyboard Part Number List
2428 keyboards found/on record (showing page 8/10 - results 1751 to 2000)...
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
2621379 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5995525 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language The original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France Data Entry |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
2621384 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5995522 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany EBCDIC |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1832723 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard (327X-78 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK 1052-7 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655158 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal/Brazil Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1825033 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1858510 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard (327X-78 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US/Canada 1052-7 w/ textured finish keys |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1825032 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1858509 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard (327X-78 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US/Canada ASCII w/ textured finish keys |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1825031 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1858508 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US/Canada ASCII w/ textured finish keys |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1825030 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1858511 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US/Canada Data Entry w/ textured finish keys |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1825029 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1858507 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard (327X-78 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US/Canada EBCDIC w/ textured finish keys |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1825028 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1858506 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US/Canada EBCDIC w/ textured finish keys |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1745697 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1785060 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Data Entry |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=0c854902bb2ff17c |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655164 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1864489 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
WTC Data Entry II w/ smooth finish keys |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655163 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655162 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655161 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden/Finland Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655160 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655159 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655157 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
2621385 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5995526 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany Data Entry |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655156 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655155 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1655154 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model B) |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamsaver |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1974 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK Data Entry II |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
5922871 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
2728620 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard (327X-78 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1972 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
81 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Katakana |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
5922870 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
2728610 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1972 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
70 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Katakana |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
2621372 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5995520 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard (327X-78 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK EBCDIC |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
2621369 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5995527 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard (327X-78 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
USA EBCDIC 1052-7 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
2621368 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5995529 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard (327X-78 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
USA ASCII |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
2621365 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5995519 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard (327X-78 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
USA EBCDIC |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
5992871 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
81 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Katakana |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
5992870 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
70 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Katakana |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
5922890 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
2728705 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy Data Entry |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
5922889 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
2728704 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy EBCDIC |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
5922888 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
2728703 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model A 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard (327X-66 type Model A) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Micro Switch SW hall effect |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1971 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
66 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy EBCDIC |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643131 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643141 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742711 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1762694 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US & EBCDIC (WTC); Data Entry II |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770664 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7363831 |
| MFI NumberMFI Number A machine feature index (MFI) number (also known as a Feature Bill of Material (FBM) number, top bill, or top part number) is a number that connects a keyboard or keyboard part to a some sort of feature code system. MFI numbers remain unchanged throughout a keyboard's lifetime, and in modern use, have a one-to-many relationship to possible SMU part numbers. MFI numbers are generally only seen on packing lists and documentations, rather than on keyboards. |
7361407 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5253/5254 Electronic Keyboard (525X-82 type Model B) |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 5253 Display Station (IBM 5520 family) IBM 5254 Dual Display Station (IBM 5520 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Canada |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed DA-15 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
96-character US English |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://wiki.keyboard.institute/doku.php?id=keyboard:ibm_5253_5254 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7363830 |
| MFI NumberMFI Number A machine feature index (MFI) number (also known as a Feature Bill of Material (FBM) number, top bill, or top part number) is a number that connects a keyboard or keyboard part to a some sort of feature code system. MFI numbers remain unchanged throughout a keyboard's lifetime, and in modern use, have a one-to-many relationship to possible SMU part numbers. MFI numbers are generally only seen on packing lists and documentations, rather than on keyboards. |
1606000 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5253/5254 Electronic Keyboard (525X-82 type Model B) |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 5253 Display Station (IBM 5520 family) IBM 5254 Dual Display Station (IBM 5520 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Canada |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed DA-15 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
82 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
92-character US English |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=39ab73bb5d22ba69 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
4412501 |
| RPQRPQ Request Price Quotation The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product. |
D02056 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 4978 Extended Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Beamship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Canada |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1978 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$1030 in 1984 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Feature number 4412533 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Series/1 System Summary (#GA34-0035-6) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.flickr.com/photos/142937728@N05/47007500141/in/album-72157676285370487/ Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?t=16725 Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/resources/docs/pdf/IBM_noid_scm-hardware-prices_1984_bitsavers.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1864959 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1854440 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
63 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Katakana |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770687 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France AZERTY |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770682 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ASCII |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770676 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin America |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770674 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German w/ English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770672 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770670 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France QWERTY |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770668 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770666 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770662 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362247 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752693 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770660 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770658 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770656 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770654 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazil |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770652 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japan |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770647 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1748182 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1748181 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643174 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France AZERTY |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643169 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
63 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Katakana |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643164 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin America |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643159 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German w/ English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643154 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362149 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752692 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362250 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752694 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazil |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643144 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362353 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752710 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French Canadian |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742710 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1645102 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US & EBCDIC (WTC); Data Entry I |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?p=504567#p504567 Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?t=1113 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742709 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5189580 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard (327X-87 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
87 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US; Text |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742708 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1648552 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard (327X-87 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
87 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US; Typewriter/overlay prog. char. set |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742707 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752462 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard (327X-87 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
87 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US; ASCII |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742706 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752918 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard (327X-87 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
87 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US; APL |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742705 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1645101 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard (327X-87 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
87 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US; Typewriter |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742704 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1648531 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US; ASCII |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742702 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1762694 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
EBCDIC (WTC); Data Entry II |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742701 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1645102 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
EBCDIC (WTC); Data Entry I |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1742700 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1645100 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Canada |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends & PEI spacebar (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US; Typewriter |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1142702 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1762694 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US; Data Entry II |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1142701 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1645102 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US; Data Entry I |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362375 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752730 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ASCII |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362349 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752708 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362251 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752695 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362316 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752707 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362301 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752706 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish Speaking |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362300 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752705 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362295 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752704 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362294 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752703 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362293 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752713 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japan, Katakana |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362292 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752702 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japan, English |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362283 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752701 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362276 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752700 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
International |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362269 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752699 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362266 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752709 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France AZERTY |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362265 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752698 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France QWERTY |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7362260 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1752697 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard (525X-83 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finland |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-4) [source: bitsavers] Doc: IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11 Parts Catalog (#S131-0620-5) [source: VT100.net] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643149 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France QWERTY |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643139 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643146 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France QWERTY (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645075 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France QWERTY (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645088 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645087 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden/Finland (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645086 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645085 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645084 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645083 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German w/ English (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645082 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645081 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645080 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin America (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645079 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazil (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645078 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645077 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645076 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643649 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France AZERTY (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645090 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France QWERTY (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643594 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643593 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden/Finland (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643592 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643591 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643590 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643589 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German w/ English (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643588 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643587 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643171 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France AZERTY (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643166 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
63 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Katakana (4-switch only) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643161 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin America (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643156 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German w/ English (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643151 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645089 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France AZERTY (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645091 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643134 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852180 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643129 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643124 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden/Finland |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643119 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643114 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643109 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazil |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1643104 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1976 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japan |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
5183435 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1864956 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1854438 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
63 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Katakana (4-switch only) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1854413 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin America (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1854394 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German w/ English (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852186 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Germany (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852183 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France QWERTY (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852177 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645092 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852174 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852171 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852168 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden/Finland (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852165 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852162 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852159 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazil (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1852156 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japan (3-switch only) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770685 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France AZERTY (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1770680 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ASCII (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1748183 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1748180 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645095 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin America (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645094 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1645093 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard (374X type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1975 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
61 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal (3 or 4 switch) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
4942014 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5194375 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark; Typewriter ops |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
4942017 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
5194386 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard (327X-75 type Model B) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM beam springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1979 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
SAN with double-shot legends (w/ possible pad-printed front-printed legends) |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
75 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
EBCDIC (WTC); Typewriter ops |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Clicker assembly (internal solenoid) Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
02K0814 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
KB-7953 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6272 PC 300GL IBM 6275 PC 300GL IBM 6282 PC 300GL IBM 6285 PC 300GL IBM 6561 PC 300GL IBM 6561 PC 300GL IBM 6591 PC 300GL IBM 6862 PC 300PL IBM 6892 PC 300PL |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Chicony |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1998 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style fixed dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
105 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazil/Portugal |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Alternatively known as the IBM PC NEXT Keyboard |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal Computer 300 Series, 700 Series and IntelliStation Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S83G-7789-18) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
42H0469 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131285 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131284 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131283 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131282 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131281 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131280 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131279 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131278 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131277 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131276 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131273 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish F-New (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
42H1331 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian Portuguese (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
42H0470 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American Spanish (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
42H0468 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131287 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
25H2177 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American Spanish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
25H2163 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397003 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1396924 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
1397500 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge Or IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1997-BT4-122 Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396990 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396921 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkey ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396919 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Iceland ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396917 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greece ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396916 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Cyrillic ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396914 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396913 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396912 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396911 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396910 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131286 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish Q-Old (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131288 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396908 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133900 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3569 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6892 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3568 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6891 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3567 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2768 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3566 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6889 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3565 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2767 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English (EMEA) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133909 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI EMEA (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133907 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133906 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133905 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133904 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133903 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133902 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133901 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133899 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss German (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131289 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss French (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133898 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss French (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133897 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133896 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1998-2TM-102 Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131299 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131298 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Romanian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131297 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hungarian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131296 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Slovak (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131295 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Czech (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131294 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Polish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131293 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131292 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Bosnian and Slovenian/Croatian/Serbian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131291 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131290 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo Or None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss German (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396909 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396906 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden/Finland ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3571 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6894 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392366 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1389715 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M-based Typewriter Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1987 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
70 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392389 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian-French/Dutch |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392388 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392387 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss German/French |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392385 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392384 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392383 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392382 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392380 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392378 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392376 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392374 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Called IBM 6100 System Keyboard as per the box |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392373 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6150 RT Personal Computer IBM 6151 RT Personal Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian-French |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ardent-tool.com/615x/6151_HMS_Sec10_User_Input_Devices.pdf Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=9eefe65b429403e4 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
76X0046 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M 4680 POS Alphanumeric Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M/AT |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Navblockless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss (French/German) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Store Systems Part Catalog (#S131-0097-09) [source: Infania Networks] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392540 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M-based Typewriter Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220404223335/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/175222346112 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
76X0045 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M 4680 POS Alphanumeric Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M/AT |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Navblockless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Store Systems Part Catalog (#S131-0097-09) [source: Infania Networks] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
76X0044 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M 4680 POS Alphanumeric Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M/AT |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Navblockless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Store Systems Part Catalog (#S131-0097-09) [source: Infania Networks] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
76X0043 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M 4680 POS Alphanumeric Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M/AT |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Navblockless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Store Systems Part Catalog (#S131-0097-09) [source: Infania Networks] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
76X0042 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M 4680 POS Alphanumeric Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M/AT |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Navblockless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Store Systems Part Catalog (#S131-0097-09) [source: Infania Networks] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
76X0041 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M 4680 POS Alphanumeric Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M/AT |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the keyswitches this keyboard uses. If the keyswitches used do not have a known name, a generic description of what they are will be provided. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter or full date) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded, or the first example found. |
1986 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocols this keyboard can use to communicate with their host systems. Typically, this is the name of some sort of serial or parallel data connection. Known scancode sets the protocol can support may also be stated in brackets. |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Navblockless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Store Systems Part Catalog (#S131-0097-09) [source: Infania Networks] |